1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
PE-Stamped Plans Included|Design Online in 3D|Financing from $89/mo

Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings For Sale

Commercial shops, industrial warehouses, farm buildings and specialty structures from $14,500. Cold-formed galvanized steel frames ship with PE-stamped engineered drawings tailored to your local wind speed and snow load requirements. Every Steel and Stud order includes free nationwide delivery. Widths from 30 to 100+ feet, lengths to 200+ feet, column-free interiors or multi-bay layouts.

$14,500
STARTING PRICE
13+
BUILDING TYPES
200ft
MAX CLEAR SPAN
48
STATES COVERED
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1361–1400 of 2405 resultsSorted by price: low to high

White steel structure event venue with black-framed glass entry and fountains in a modern courtyard

20×32 Community / Church Storage

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Community / Church Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,400

12

20×32 Community / Church Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,000$11,400SAVE $1,600
or $238/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Community / Church Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Community / Church Storage, engineered to code for assembly use.

Churches, schools, and HOAs use the 20×32 as event-gear storage, groundskeeping equipment lockup, or a backup classroom with insulation and HVAC. Stamped engineered drawings meet IBC and IRC requirements for.

You’re viewing:Community / Church Storage·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,400$13,000Save $1,600
or as low as $238/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$11,100
20×32
this size
$11,400
20×35
longer
$12,300
24×32
wider
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • IBC Certified
  • Insulated
  • Steel Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-COMMUNITY-CHURCHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 community / church storage.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Churches, schools, and HOAs use the 20×32 as event-gear storage, groundskeeping equipment lockup, or a backup classroom with insulation and HVAC.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft

Community / Church Storage layout.

Churches, schools, and HOAs use the 20×32 as event-gear storage, groundskeeping equipment lockup, or a backup classroom with insulation and HVAC. Stamped engineered drawings meet IBC and IRC requirements for institutional sites with public access.

💡 Pro tip:Community / Church Storage works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Community / Church Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community / Church Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community / Church Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community / Church Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday community / church storage
Everyday community / church storage
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community / church storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommunity / church storage + seasonal storage
community / church storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Community / Church Storage, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$238/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 community / church storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $238/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community / Church Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Community / Church Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Community / Church Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Community / Church Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Community / Church Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Community / Church Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 community / church storage cost?

A 20×32 community / church storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $238/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 community / church storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud community / church storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 community / church storage?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud community / church storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 community / church storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 community / church storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 community / church storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $238/month on a 20×32 community / church storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 community / church storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 community / church storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×32 community / church storage pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Community / Church Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure event venue with black-framed glass entry and fountains in a modern courtyard

20×32 Community / Church Storage

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with brown roll-up door and white entry in autumn woods

12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop), built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners pick this layout when a standard 12×30 garage feels cramped. The extra 10 feet behind the vehicle holds a workbench, rolling tool chest, and pegboard wall. A full-size F-150 (19’6") fits with 10+ feet of.

You’re viewing:Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-METAL-GARAGE-ONEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop).

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Homeowners pick this layout when a standard 12×30 garage feels cramped.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) layout.

Homeowners pick this layout when a standard 12×30 garage feels cramped. The extra 10 feet behind the vehicle holds a workbench, rolling tool chest, and pegboard wall. A full-size F-150 (19’6") fits with 10+ feet of clear bench space behind the bumper.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop).

DAILY USEEveryday metal garage (one-car + workshop)
Everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop)
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal garage (one-car + workshop).
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal garage (one-car + workshop) + seasonal storage
metal garage (one-car + workshop) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop), what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) cost?

A 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal garage (one-car + workshop) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop)?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal garage (one-car + workshop) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop).

What warranty comes with the 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with brown roll-up door and white entry in autumn woods

12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal shed with single-slope roof and open front in rocky mountain terrain

12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Carport for Truck + Trailer

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer, built for daily backyard use.

Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility trailer hitched, end to end. Small property owners use this when a 12×30 carport leaves the trailer tongue exposed. Vertical roof sheds.

You’re viewing:Carport for Truck + Trailer·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 140 MPH Rated
  • Open Sides
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-CARPORT-TRUCK-TRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 carport for truck + trailer.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility trailer hitched, end to end.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft

Carport for Truck + Trailer layout.

Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility trailer hitched, end to end. Small property owners use this when a 12×30 carport leaves the trailer tongue exposed. Vertical roof sheds rain off both sides without gutter overflow.

💡 Pro tip:Carport for Truck + Trailer works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport for Truck + Trailer.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport for Truck + Trailer spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport for Truck + Trailer.

DAILY USEEveryday carport for truck + trailer
Everyday carport for truck + trailer
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport for truck + trailer.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport for truck + trailer + seasonal storage
carport for truck + trailer + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 carport for truck + trailer is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport for Truck + Trailer shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport for Truck + Trailer · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport for Truck + Trailer also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport for Truck + Trailer questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 carport for truck + trailer cost?

A 12×30 carport for truck + trailer from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 carport for truck + trailer price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport for truck + trailer ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 carport for truck + trailer?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport for truck + trailer different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 carport for truck + trailer need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 carport for truck + trailer delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 carport for truck + trailer without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 carport for truck + trailer.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 carport for truck + trailer?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 carport for truck + trailer in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 carport for truck + trailer add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 carport for truck + trailer typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport for Truck + Trailer quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal shed with single-slope roof and open front in rocky mountain terrain

12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green rv metal cover with timber posts framing a motorhome below snowy peaks

12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Boat & RV Storage Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover, built for hobby and recreational use.

Hobbyists with a 24′-26′ bass boat on a tandem-axle trailer fit it under a 12×30 canopy with the outboard cleared. Class-B vans and small Class-C RVs (under 28′) also tuck inside at 12-14′ leg height. Saves $1,200+ a.

You’re viewing:Boat & RV Storage Cover·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • A-Frame Vertical
  • 12′ Leg Height
  • UV-Resistant Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-BOAT-RV-STORAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 boat & rv storage cover.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Hobbyists with a 24′-26′ bass boat on a tandem-axle trailer fit it under a 12×30 canopy with the outboard cleared.

RV BAYDaily Driver12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft · tall walls

Boat & RV Storage Cover layout.

Hobbyists with a 24′-26′ bass boat on a tandem-axle trailer fit it under a 12×30 canopy with the outboard cleared. Class-B vans and small Class-C RVs (under 28′) also tuck inside at 12-14′ leg height. Saves $1,200+ a year over commercial storage lots.

💡 Pro tip:Boat & RV Storage Cover works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & RV Storage Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & RV Storage Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & RV Storage Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & rv storage cover
Everyday boat & rv storage cover
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & rv storage cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & rv storage cover + seasonal storage
boat & rv storage cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 boat & rv storage cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & RV Storage Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & RV Storage Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & RV Storage Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & RV Storage Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 boat & rv storage cover cost?

A 12×30 boat & rv storage cover from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 boat & rv storage cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat & rv storage cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 boat & rv storage cover?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & rv storage cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 boat & rv storage cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 boat & rv storage cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 boat & rv storage cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 boat & rv storage cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 boat & rv storage cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 boat & rv storage cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×30 boat & rv storage cover for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat & rv storage cover to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & RV Storage Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green rv metal cover with timber posts framing a motorhome below snowy peaks

12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal shed storage interior with wire shelving, bins, hanging bikes, and riding mower entering

12×30 Storage Building (Backyard)

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Storage Building (Backyard) | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Storage Building (Backyard)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Storage Building (Backyard)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Storage Building (Backyard), built for daily backyard use.

Fully enclosed storage shed for homeowners with too much gear and no basement. Holds two riding mowers, a snowblower, kayaks on a wall rack, and seasonal bins on shelving. Single 12×30 roll-up plus a 36" walk-in door.

You’re viewing:Storage Building (Backyard)·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 29 GA Panels
  • Walk-In Door
  • R-13 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 storage building (backyard).

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Fully enclosed storage shed for homeowners with too much gear and no basement.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft shop

Storage Building (Backyard) layout.

Fully enclosed storage shed for homeowners with too much gear and no basement. Holds two riding mowers, a snowblower, kayaks on a wall rack, and seasonal bins on shelving. Single 12×30 roll-up plus a 36" walk-in door makes daily access easy.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Building (Backyard) works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Storage Building (Backyard) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building (Backyard).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building (Backyard) spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building (Backyard).

DAILY USEEveryday storage building (backyard)
Everyday storage building (backyard)
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building (backyard).
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building (backyard) + seasonal storage
storage building (backyard) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Storage Building (Backyard), what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 storage building (backyard) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building (Backyard) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Storage Building (Backyard) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Storage Building (Backyard)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Building (Backyard) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building (Backyard) also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building (Backyard) questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 storage building (backyard) cost?

A 12×30 storage building (backyard) from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 storage building (backyard) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage building (backyard) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 storage building (backyard)?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building (backyard) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 storage building (backyard) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 storage building (backyard) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 storage building (backyard) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 storage building (backyard).

What warranty comes with the 12×30 storage building (backyard)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 storage building (backyard) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 storage building (backyard) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 storage building (backyard) typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building (Backyard) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal shed storage interior with wire shelving, bins, hanging bikes, and riding mower entering

12×30 Storage Building (Backyard)

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building kit with cream roll-up door and window in a landscaped garden

12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover, built for daily backyard use.

Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout with walking room left over. Gardeners running a small property use the.

You’re viewing:Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Vertical Roof
  • Galvalume Trim
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-LAWN-GARDEN-EQUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout with walking room left over.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft shop

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover layout.

Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout with walking room left over. Gardeners running a small property use the long 30-foot wall for double sliding barn doors so a sub-compact tractor can drive straight in. Galvalume trim shrugs off fertilizer and irrigation overspray.

💡 Pro tip:Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday lawn & garden equipment cover
Everyday lawn & garden equipment cover
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a lawn & garden equipment cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlawn & garden equipment cover + seasonal storage
lawn & garden equipment cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover cost?

A 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud lawn & garden equipment cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud lawn & garden equipment cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building kit with cream roll-up door and window in a landscaped garden

12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel structure office with flat roof and glass front beside landscaped parking

12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Workshop / Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 12×30 enclosed for a dedicated 360 sq ft workspace. Insulated walls plus a mini-split keep it usable year-round. Two 12×30 windows on the.

You’re viewing:Workshop / Hobby Room·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 2 Windows Std
  • Insulated Walk-In
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 workshop / hobby room.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 12×30 enclosed for a dedicated 360 sq ft workspace.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft

Workshop / Hobby Room layout.

Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 12×30 enclosed for a dedicated 360 sq ft workspace. Insulated walls plus a mini-split keep it usable year-round. Two 12×30 windows on the long wall pull in natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Workshop / Hobby Room works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby room
Everyday workshop / hobby room
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby room + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 workshop / hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 workshop / hobby room cost?

A 12×30 workshop / hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 workshop / hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 workshop / hobby room?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 workshop / hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 workshop / hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 workshop / hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 workshop / hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 workshop / hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 workshop / hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 workshop / hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 workshop / hobby room typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel structure office with flat roof and glass front beside landscaped parking

12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure wellness studio in dusty rose with covered workout porch and glass doors

12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Home Office / Backyard Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready interior, and a 36" entry door. 360 sq ft fits a desk zone, lounge corner, and a small kitchenette wall. Add wainscoting and Pewter Gray.

You’re viewing:Home Office / Backyard Studio·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Package
  • HOA-Friendly Colors
  • French Door Option
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-HOME-OFFICE-BACKBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 home office / backyard studio.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready interior, and a 36" entry door.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft

Home Office / Backyard Studio layout.

Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready interior, and a 36" entry door. 360 sq ft fits a desk zone, lounge corner, and a small kitchenette wall. Add wainscoting and Pewter Gray walls for residential curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office / Backyard Studio works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office / Backyard Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office / Backyard Studio spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office / Backyard Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home office / backyard studio
Everyday home office / backyard studio
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office / backyard studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
home office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 home office / backyard studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office / Backyard Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office / Backyard Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office / Backyard Studio also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office / Backyard Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 home office / backyard studio cost?

A 12×30 home office / backyard studio from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 home office / backyard studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 home office / backyard studio?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 home office / backyard studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 home office / backyard studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 home office / backyard studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 home office / backyard studio.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 home office / backyard studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 home office / backyard studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 home office / backyard studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 home office / backyard studio typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office / Backyard Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure wellness studio in dusty rose with covered workout porch and glass doors

12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Open front metal shed with single slope roof and wood posts near grain bins

12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover | Steel and Stud, From $5,950

12

12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,800$5,950SAVE $850
or $124/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Hay & Feed Storage Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, built for farm and ranch demands.

Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 12×30 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side open lets you back a flatbed straight up. Vertical roof prevents.

You’re viewing:Hay & Feed Storage Cover·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,950$6,800Save $850
or as low as $124/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,900
12×30
this size
$5,950
12×32
longer
$6,300
14×30
wider
$6,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 3-Side Enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • 65 PSF Snow
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-HAY-FEED-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 hay & feed storage cover.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 12×30 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft

Hay & Feed Storage Cover layout.

Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 12×30 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side open lets you back a flatbed straight up. Vertical roof prevents water pooling on long runs.

💡 Pro tip:Hay & Feed Storage Cover works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Feed Storage Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & feed storage cover
Everyday hay & feed storage cover
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & feed storage cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
hay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$124/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 hay & feed storage cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $124/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Feed Storage Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Feed Storage Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Feed Storage Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Feed Storage Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 hay & feed storage cover cost?

A 12×30 hay & feed storage cover from Steel and Stud starts at $5,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $124/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 hay & feed storage cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 hay & feed storage cover?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 hay & feed storage cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 hay & feed storage cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 hay & feed storage cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $124/month on a 12×30 hay & feed storage cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 hay & feed storage cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 hay & feed storage cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×30 hay & feed storage cover stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Feed Storage Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Open front metal shed with single slope roof and wood posts near grain bins

12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel building storage shed with open roll-up door showing zero turn mower and shelving

12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all inside 360 sq ft. Roll-up door on the gable end lets you ride in and out without dismounting. Common spec for hunting cabins and rural.

You’re viewing:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Mud-Friendly Galvalume
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-ATV-SIDE-BY-SIDEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all inside 360 sq ft.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage layout.

Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all inside 360 sq ft. Roll-up door on the gable end lets you ride in and out without dismounting. Common spec for hunting cabins and rural hobbyists.

💡 Pro tip:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv & side-by-side garage
Everyday atv & side-by-side garage
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv & side-by-side garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
atv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV & Side-by-Side Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV & Side-by-Side Garage also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage cost?

A 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a atv & side-by-side garage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel building storage shed with open roll-up door showing zero turn mower and shelving

12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure poolside cabana with glass door, black-trimmed windows and lounge chairs

12×30 Pool House / Cabana

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Pool House / Cabana | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Pool House / Cabana
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Pool House / Cabana

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Pool House / Cabana, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 12×30 as a pool house with a covered changing room, equipment storage, and a shaded lounge zone. Split it 12×30 enclosed plus a 12×30 open-side cover, same building, two.

You’re viewing:Pool House / Cabana·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Partial Enclosure
  • Custom Color Match
  • French Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-POOL-HOUSE-CABANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 pool house / cabana.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 12×30 as a pool house with a covered changing room, equipment storage, and a shaded lounge zone.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft ADU

Pool House / Cabana layout.

Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 12×30 as a pool house with a covered changing room, equipment storage, and a shaded lounge zone. Split it 12×30 enclosed plus a 12×30 open-side cover, same building, two functions.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House / Cabana works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Pool House / Cabana in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House / Cabana.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House / Cabana spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House / Cabana.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house / cabana
Everyday pool house / cabana
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house / cabana.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house / cabana + seasonal storage
pool house / cabana + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Pool House / Cabana, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 pool house / cabana is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House / Cabana shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Pool House / Cabana buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Pool House / Cabana

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House / Cabana · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House / Cabana also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House / Cabana questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 pool house / cabana cost?

A 12×30 pool house / cabana from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 pool house / cabana price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house / cabana ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 pool house / cabana?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house / cabana different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 pool house / cabana need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 pool house / cabana delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 pool house / cabana without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 pool house / cabana.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 pool house / cabana?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 pool house / cabana in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 pool house / cabana add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 pool house / cabana typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House / Cabana quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure poolside cabana with glass door, black-trimmed windows and lounge chairs

12×30 Pool House / Cabana

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Backyard prefab metal building gym in coastal teal with double barn doors and treadmill

12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Tool Shed for Contractors

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors, built for daily backyard use.

Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock, compressor, miter saw station, and stacked totes. The 12×30 roll-up swallows a full sheet of plywood flat. Slide bolt plus deadbolt plus.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed for Contractors·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Deadbolt + Wi-Fi
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-TOOL-SHED-CONTRABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 tool shed for contractors.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock, compressor, miter saw station, and stacked totes.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft

Tool Shed for Contractors layout.

Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock, compressor, miter saw station, and stacked totes. The 12×30 roll-up swallows a full sheet of plywood flat. Slide bolt plus deadbolt plus Wi-Fi opener keeps it secure overnight.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed for Contractors works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed for Contractors.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed for Contractors spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed for Contractors.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed for contractors
Everyday tool shed for contractors
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed for contractors.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed for contractors + seasonal storage
tool shed for contractors + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 tool shed for contractors is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed for Contractors shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed for Contractors · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed for Contractors also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed for Contractors questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 tool shed for contractors cost?

A 12×30 tool shed for contractors from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 tool shed for contractors price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed for contractors ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 tool shed for contractors?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed for contractors different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 tool shed for contractors need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 tool shed for contractors delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 tool shed for contractors without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 tool shed for contractors.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 tool shed for contractors?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 tool shed for contractors in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 tool shed for contractors add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 tool shed for contractors typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed for Contractors quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Backyard prefab metal building gym in coastal teal with double barn doors and treadmill

12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel building with dark trim, lean to covered patio, and string lights at dusk

12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $5,950

12

12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,800$5,950SAVE $850
or $124/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Tractor & Implement Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To, built for farm and ranch demands.

Configured as a lean-to or attached to an existing pole barn, the 12×30 covers a sub-compact tractor with a 5′ brush hog, plus a box blade and post-hole digger lined up behind it. Open gable ends let you drive straight.

You’re viewing:Tractor & Implement Lean-To·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,950$6,800Save $850
or as low as $124/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,900
12×30
this size
$5,950
12×32
longer
$6,300
14×30
wider
$6,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Config
  • Attaches To Existing
  • Open Gables
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-TRACTOR-IMPLEMENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Configured as a lean-to or attached to an existing pole barn, the 12×30 covers a sub-compact tractor with a 5′ brush hog, plus a box blade and post-hole digger lined up behind it.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft shop

Tractor & Implement Lean-To layout.

Configured as a lean-to or attached to an existing pole barn, the 12×30 covers a sub-compact tractor with a 5′ brush hog, plus a box blade and post-hole digger lined up behind it. Open gable ends let you drive straight through.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor & Implement Lean-To works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor & Implement Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor & Implement Lean-To spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor & Implement Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor & implement lean-to
Everyday tractor & implement lean-to
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor & implement lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor & implement lean-to + seasonal storage
tractor & implement lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$124/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $124/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor & Implement Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor & Implement Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor & Implement Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor & Implement Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to cost?

A 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $5,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $124/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor & implement lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor & implement lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $124/month on a 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor & Implement Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel building with dark trim, lean to covered patio, and string lights at dusk

12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Light gray metal garage with black roof and black roll-up door near a pond

18×20 One-Car Garage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 One-Car Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 One-Car Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20One-Car Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 One-Car Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners replacing a tired wood-frame garage pick this footprint because it fits a full-size sedan or mid-size SUV with 3 ft of side clearance for opening doors. The extra 2 ft over a 16-wide gives you a real.

You’re viewing:One-Car Garage·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 9×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-ONE-CAR-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 one-car garage.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Homeowners replacing a tired wood-frame garage pick this footprint because it fits a full-size sedan or mid-size SUV with 3 ft of side clearance for opening doors.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

One-Car Garage layout.

Homeowners replacing a tired wood-frame garage pick this footprint because it fits a full-size sedan or mid-size SUV with 3 ft of side clearance for opening doors. The extra 2 ft over a 16-wide gives you a real walk-around. Adds resale value and code-compliant covered parking.

💡 Pro tip:One-Car Garage works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 One-Car Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your One-Car Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

One-Car Garage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use One-Car Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday one-car garage
Everyday one-car garage
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a one-car garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWone-car garage + seasonal storage
one-car garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 One-Car Garage, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 one-car garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from One-Car Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 One-Car Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 One-Car Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your One-Car Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose One-Car Garage also viewed:

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

One-Car Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 one-car garage cost?

A 18×20 one-car garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 one-car garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud one-car garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 one-car garage?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud one-car garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 one-car garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 one-car garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 one-car garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 one-car garage.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 one-car garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 one-car garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 one-car garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 one-car garage typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your One-Car Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Light gray metal garage with black roof and black roll-up door near a pond

18×20 One-Car Garage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green metal workshop with single slope roof, black roll up door, and tall narrow windows

18×20 Backyard Workshop

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Backyard Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Backyard Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Backyard Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Backyard Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Hobbyists building a woodshop or metal-fab corner spec the 12 ft leg height for clearance over a table saw and dust-collection ductwork. The 18 ft width holds a 4 ft workbench, two rolling tool chests, and a center.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • Vertical Roof
  • Skylight Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 backyard workshop.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Hobbyists building a woodshop or metal-fab corner spec the 12 ft leg height for clearance over a table saw and dust-collection ductwork.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Backyard Workshop layout.

Hobbyists building a woodshop or metal-fab corner spec the 12 ft leg height for clearance over a table saw and dust-collection ductwork. The 18 ft width holds a 4 ft workbench, two rolling tool chests, and a center floor zone for sheet-goods cuts. Skylights and a 36-inch walk-in door round it out.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Backyard Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop
Everyday backyard workshop
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop + seasonal storage
backyard workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Backyard Workshop, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 backyard workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Backyard Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Backyard Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 backyard workshop cost?

A 18×20 backyard workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 backyard workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 backyard workshop?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 backyard workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 backyard workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 backyard workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 backyard workshop.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 backyard workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 backyard workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 backyard workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 backyard workshop typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green metal workshop with single slope roof, black roll up door, and tall narrow windows

18×20 Backyard Workshop

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Crimson metal shed with open bays and wood posts as a loafing shelter in hill country

18×20 Storage Shed

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Storage Shed | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Storage Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Storage Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Storage Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Small property owners who outgrew a 18×20 plastic shed step up to an 18×20 metal shed for ride-on mower, snow-blower, kayaks, and seasonal patio furniture all in one steel-walled enclosure. A double-roll-up on the gable.

You’re viewing:Storage Shed·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 29 GA Panels
  • Double Roll-Up
  • 20-Yr Warranty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-STORAGE-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 storage shed.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Small property owners who outgrew a 18×20 plastic shed step up to an 18×20 metal shed for ride-on mower, snow-blower, kayaks, and seasonal patio furniture all in one steel-walled enclosure.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft shop

Storage Shed layout.

Small property owners who outgrew a 18×20 plastic shed step up to an 18×20 metal shed for ride-on mower, snow-blower, kayaks, and seasonal patio furniture all in one steel-walled enclosure. A double-roll-up on the gable end lets you back the mower in straight. Far cheaper than building a wood storage shed.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Shed works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Storage Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Shed spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday storage shed
Everyday storage shed
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage shed + seasonal storage
storage shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Storage Shed, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 storage shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Storage Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Storage Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Shed also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 storage shed cost?

A 18×20 storage shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 storage shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 storage shed?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 storage shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 storage shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 storage shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 storage shed.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 storage shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 storage shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 storage shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 storage shed typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Crimson metal shed with open bays and wood posts as a loafing shelter in hill country

18×20 Storage Shed

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building with black roof and black roll-up door beside fenced pasture

18×20 Garage with Loft

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Garage with Loft | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Garage with Loft
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Garage with Loft

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Garage with Loft, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners who want vertical storage spec 12-14 ft legs and add an engineered mezzanine over the back 8 ft of the building. The loft holds seasonal totes, hunting gear, or a future bunk space while the floor stays open.

You’re viewing:Garage with Loft·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered Loft
  • 14′ Legs
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-GARAGE-LOFTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 garage with loft.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Homeowners who want vertical storage spec 12-14 ft legs and add an engineered mezzanine over the back 8 ft of the building.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Garage with Loft layout.

Homeowners who want vertical storage spec 12-14 ft legs and add an engineered mezzanine over the back 8 ft of the building. The loft holds seasonal totes, hunting gear, or a future bunk space while the floor stays open for the vehicle. Stamped drawings cover the loft load.

💡 Pro tip:Garage with Loft works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Garage with Loft in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage with Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage with Loft spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage with Loft.

DAILY USEEveryday garage with loft
Everyday garage with loft
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage with loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage with loft + seasonal storage
garage with loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Garage with Loft, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 garage with loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage with Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Garage with Loft buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Garage with Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garage with Loft · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage with Loft also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage with Loft questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 garage with loft cost?

A 18×20 garage with loft from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 garage with loft price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garage with loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 garage with loft?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage with loft different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 garage with loft need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 garage with loft delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 garage with loft without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 garage with loft.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 garage with loft?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 garage with loft in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 garage with loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 garage with loft typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage with Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building with black roof and black roll-up door beside fenced pasture

18×20 Garage with Loft

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green prefab metal building at dusk with lit picture windows showing a home hobby studio inside

18×20 Home Office

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Home Office | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Home Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Home Office

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Home Office, built for daily backyard use.

Remote workers spec R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, and a French-door entry to turn 360 sq ft into a permitted home office detached from the main house. Holds a desk, conference seating for four, and a printer.

You’re viewing:Home Office·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • French Doors
  • Year-Round Use
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-HOME-OFFICEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 home office.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Remote workers spec R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, and a French-door entry to turn 360 sq ft into a permitted home office detached from the main house.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Home Office layout.

Remote workers spec R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, and a French-door entry to turn 360 sq ft into a permitted home office detached from the main house. Holds a desk, conference seating for four, and a printer credenza. Insulated metal panels keep it usable year-round in any climate zone.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Home Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office.

DAILY USEEveryday home office
Everyday home office
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office + seasonal storage
home office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Home Office, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 home office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Home Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Home Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 home office cost?

A 18×20 home office from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 home office price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 home office?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 home office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 home office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 home office without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 home office.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 home office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 home office in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 home office add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 home office typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green prefab metal building at dusk with lit picture windows showing a home hobby studio inside

18×20 Home Office

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green prefab metal building at dusk with lit picture windows showing a home hobby studio inside

18×20 Hobby Room

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Hobbyists running model trains, RC cars, ham radio, or pottery wheels use the full 360 sq ft as a dedicated room away from the house. A 12 ft leg height fits ceiling-mounted antennas or a kiln vent. Insulation plus a.

You’re viewing:Hobby Room·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated
  • 12′ Legs Optional
  • Quiet Buildout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-HOBBY-ROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 hobby room.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Hobbyists running model trains, RC cars, ham radio, or pottery wheels use the full 360 sq ft as a dedicated room away from the house.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑18′ × 20′ · 360 ground + loft

Hobby Room layout.

Hobbyists running model trains, RC cars, ham radio, or pottery wheels use the full 360 sq ft as a dedicated room away from the house. A 12 ft leg height fits ceiling-mounted antennas or a kiln vent. Insulation plus a window AC keeps the temperature stable.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Room works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby room
Everyday hobby room
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby room + seasonal storage
hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Hobby Room, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 hobby room cost?

A 18×20 hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 hobby room?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 hobby room typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green prefab metal building at dusk with lit picture windows showing a home hobby studio inside

18×20 Hobby Room

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal shed with single-slope roof and open side bays on a fenced pasture at sunset

18×20 Tool Shed

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Tool Shed | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Tool Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Tool Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Tool Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners with a serious tool collection use this footprint as a dedicated tool shed separate from vehicle storage. Wall-to-wall French cleat boards, a rolling tool chest, and a workbench leave a clear floor for.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Slide Bolt Lock
  • Walk-In Door
  • 14 GA Standard
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-TOOL-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 tool shed.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Homeowners with a serious tool collection use this footprint as a dedicated tool shed separate from vehicle storage.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Tool Shed layout.

Homeowners with a serious tool collection use this footprint as a dedicated tool shed separate from vehicle storage. Wall-to-wall French cleat boards, a rolling tool chest, and a workbench leave a clear floor for project assembly. Lockable walk-in door keeps everything secure.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Tool Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed
Everyday tool shed
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed + seasonal storage
tool shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Tool Shed, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 tool shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Tool Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Tool Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 tool shed cost?

A 18×20 tool shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 tool shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 tool shed?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 tool shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 tool shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 tool shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 tool shed.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 tool shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 tool shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 tool shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 tool shed typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal shed with single-slope roof and open side bays on a fenced pasture at sunset

18×20 Tool Shed

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Open charcoal steel garage revealing boat, ATV and shelving inside a fenced gravel lot

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Zero-turn, push mower, string trimmer, and gas cans all live in one steel-walled building rated for the long haul, the 8 ft roll-up clears most residential mower decks and concrete anchors survive wind events that.

You’re viewing:Mower & Outdoor Power Storage·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 8×8 Roll-Up
  • Hurricane Optional
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-MOWER-OUTDOOR-POBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Zero-turn, push mower, string trimmer, and gas cans all live in one steel-walled building rated for the long haul, the 8 ft roll-up clears most residential mower decks and concrete anchors survive wind events that flatten plastic sheds.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft shop

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage layout.

Zero-turn, push mower, string trimmer, and gas cans all live in one steel-walled building rated for the long haul, the 8 ft roll-up clears most residential mower decks and concrete anchors survive wind events that flatten plastic sheds. Small property owners pick this layout to keep gasoline equipment out of the main garage and away from the house.

💡 Pro tip:Mower & Outdoor Power Storage works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mower & Outdoor Power Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mower & Outdoor Power Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday mower & outdoor power storage
Everyday mower & outdoor power storage
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mower & outdoor power storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmower & outdoor power storage + seasonal storage
mower & outdoor power storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mower & Outdoor Power Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mower & Outdoor Power Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mower & Outdoor Power Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage cost?

A 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud mower & outdoor power storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mower & outdoor power storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Mower & Outdoor Power Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Open charcoal steel garage revealing boat, ATV and shelving inside a fenced gravel lot

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Coastal pool house interior in a metal building with shiplap walls, barn door, and towel bench

18×20 Pool House

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Pool House | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Pool House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Pool House

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Pool House, built for hobby and recreational use.

Backyard pool owners convert 360 sq ft into a cabana with changing area, towel storage, mini-fridge corner, and covered lounge zone. A wide French-door opening on the pool-facing side blurs indoor-outdoor. Insulated.

You’re viewing:Pool House·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • French Doors
  • Insulated Panels
  • Custom Color Match
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-POOL-HOUSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 pool house.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Backyard pool owners convert 360 sq ft into a cabana with changing area, towel storage, mini-fridge corner, and covered lounge zone.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft ADU

Pool House layout.

Backyard pool owners convert 360 sq ft into a cabana with changing area, towel storage, mini-fridge corner, and covered lounge zone. A wide French-door opening on the pool-facing side blurs indoor-outdoor. Insulated metal panels stay comfortable in summer heat.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Pool House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house
Everyday pool house
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house + seasonal storage
pool house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Pool House, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 pool house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Pool House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Pool House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 pool house cost?

A 18×20 pool house from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 pool house price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 pool house?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 pool house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 pool house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 pool house without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 pool house.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 pool house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 pool house in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×20 pool house for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a pool house to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Coastal pool house interior in a metal building with shiplap walls, barn door, and towel bench

18×20 Pool House

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal carport with open sides sheltering a truck and SUV at sunset

18×20 Carport Replacement

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Carport Replacement | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Carport Replacement
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Carport Replacement

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Carport Replacement, built for daily backyard use.

Existing 18×20 carport owners shopping replacement parts often upgrade to a fully enclosed building instead. Same footprint, same anchors in many cases, but four walls and a lockable door solve theft and weather.

You’re viewing:Carport Replacement·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Same Footprint
  • Full Enclosure
  • Upgrade Path
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-CARPORT-REPLACEMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 carport replacement.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Existing 18×20 carport owners shopping replacement parts often upgrade to a fully enclosed building instead.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Carport Replacement layout.

Existing 18×20 carport owners shopping replacement parts often upgrade to a fully enclosed building instead. Same footprint, same anchors in many cases, but four walls and a lockable door solve theft and weather problems for good. Trade-up pricing applies if your old frame still has life.

💡 Pro tip:Carport Replacement works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Carport Replacement in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport Replacement.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport Replacement spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport Replacement.

DAILY USEEveryday carport replacement
Everyday carport replacement
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport replacement.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport replacement + seasonal storage
carport replacement + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Carport Replacement, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 carport replacement is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport Replacement shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Carport Replacement buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Carport Replacement

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport Replacement · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport Replacement also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport Replacement questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 carport replacement cost?

A 18×20 carport replacement from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 carport replacement price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport replacement ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 carport replacement?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport replacement different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 carport replacement need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 carport replacement delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 carport replacement without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 carport replacement.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 carport replacement?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 carport replacement in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 carport replacement add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 carport replacement typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport Replacement quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal carport with open sides sheltering a truck and SUV at sunset

18×20 Carport Replacement

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy metal carport with white trim sheltering a silver truck and red UTV

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Motorcycle & Toy Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Riders use 360 sq ft for two motorcycles, a UTV, jet ski trailer, or a classic project car under tarp. The 18 ft width gives room to walk between bikes without bar bumps. Lockable walk-in door and reinforced anchor.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle & Toy Garage·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Reinforced Anchors
  • Walk-In Door
  • Theft Deterrent
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-MOTORCYCLE-TOY-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Riders use 360 sq ft for two motorcycles, a UTV, jet ski trailer, or a classic project car under tarp.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Motorcycle & Toy Garage layout.

Riders use 360 sq ft for two motorcycles, a UTV, jet ski trailer, or a classic project car under tarp. The 18 ft width gives room to walk between bikes without bar bumps. Lockable walk-in door and reinforced anchor pattern keep your toys where you left them.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle & Toy Garage works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & Toy Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & Toy Garage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & Toy Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & toy garage
Everyday motorcycle & toy garage
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & toy garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & toy garage + seasonal storage
motorcycle & toy garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & Toy Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & Toy Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & Toy Garage also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & Toy Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage cost?

A 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle & toy garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & toy garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & Toy Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy metal carport with white trim sheltering a silver truck and red UTV

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with gray wainscot and roll-up door at mountain sunset

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Two-Car Detached Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners pick this footprint when a standard 20×35 feels cramped. Park two F-150s nose-to-tail with 13 feet left over for a workbench, tool chest, and bike storage. Side-by-side parking works too with a 12-foot or.

You’re viewing:Two-Car Detached Garage·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 two-car detached garage.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Homeowners pick this footprint when a standard 20×35 feels cramped.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

Two-Car Detached Garage layout.

Homeowners pick this footprint when a standard 20×35 feels cramped. Park two F-150s nose-to-tail with 13 feet left over for a workbench, tool chest, and bike storage. Side-by-side parking works too with a 12-foot or 16-foot roll-up. Two walk-in doors keep daily traffic off the main bay.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Car Detached Garage works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car detached garage
Everyday two-car detached garage
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car detached garage + seasonal storage
two-car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 two-car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 two-car detached garage cost?

A 20×35 two-car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 two-car detached garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 two-car detached garage?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 two-car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 two-car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 two-car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 two-car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 two-car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 two-car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×35 two-car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×35 two-car detached garage typically adds $5,600–$8,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with gray wainscot and roll-up door at mountain sunset

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Brown commercial metal building with roll-up door and gooseneck lights in open meadow

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Three-Car Compact Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Rural property owners with three drivers in the household order this size to fit three compact cars or two sedans plus a motorcycle. The 35-foot length swallows a Civic, Corolla, and Mazda3 with door-swing room. Spec a.

You’re viewing:Three-Car Compact Garage·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • A-Frame Roof
  • 9×8 Roll-Ups
  • 3-Car Capable
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-THREE-CAR-COMPACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 three-car compact garage.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Rural property owners with three drivers in the household order this size to fit three compact cars or two sedans plus a motorcycle.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

Three-Car Compact Garage layout.

Rural property owners with three drivers in the household order this size to fit three compact cars or two sedans plus a motorcycle. The 35-foot length swallows a Civic, Corolla, and Mazda3 with door-swing room. Spec a 20×35 roll-up on each gable for pull-through, or one 16-foot opening for side parking.

💡 Pro tip:Three-Car Compact Garage works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Three-Car Compact Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Three-Car Compact Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Three-Car Compact Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday three-car compact garage
Everyday three-car compact garage
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three-car compact garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWthree-car compact garage + seasonal storage
three-car compact garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 three-car compact garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Three-Car Compact Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Three-Car Compact Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Three-Car Compact Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Three-Car Compact Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 three-car compact garage cost?

A 20×35 three-car compact garage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 three-car compact garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud three-car compact garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 three-car compact garage?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud three-car compact garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 three-car compact garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 three-car compact garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 three-car compact garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 three-car compact garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 three-car compact garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 three-car compact garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×35 three-car compact garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×35 three-car compact garage typically adds $5,600–$8,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Three-Car Compact Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Brown commercial metal building with roll-up door and gooseneck lights in open meadow

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy metal garage with two open bays holding an RV and boat among lakeside pines

20×35 RV Cover and Carport

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 RV Cover and Carport | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 RV Cover and Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35RV Cover and Carport

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 RV Cover and Carport, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners use the 35-foot length to cover a Class C, Class B+, or 30-foot travel trailer with hitch room to spare. A 13-foot leg height clears most rooftop AC units and slide-toppers. Order it open on the gable ends.

You’re viewing:RV Cover and Carport·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 12-14 ft Legs
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-RV-COVER-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 rv cover and carport.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. RV owners use the 35-foot length to cover a Class C, Class B+, or 30-foot travel trailer with hitch room to spare.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

RV Cover and Carport layout.

RV owners use the 35-foot length to cover a Class C, Class B+, or 30-foot travel trailer with hitch room to spare. A 13-foot leg height clears most rooftop AC units and slide-toppers. Order it open on the gable ends, partially enclosed for storage, or fully enclosed as a garage with a 20×35 roll-up.

💡 Pro tip:RV Cover and Carport works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 RV Cover and Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover and Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover and Carport spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover and Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover and carport
Everyday rv cover and carport
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover and carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover and carport + seasonal storage
rv cover and carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 RV Cover and Carport, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 rv cover and carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover and Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 RV Cover and Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 RV Cover and Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover and Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover and Carport also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover and Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 rv cover and carport cost?

A 20×35 rv cover and carport from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 rv cover and carport price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover and carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 rv cover and carport?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover and carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 rv cover and carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 rv cover and carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 rv cover and carport without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 rv cover and carport.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 rv cover and carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 rv cover and carport in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×35 rv cover and carport for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover and carport to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover and Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy metal garage with two open bays holding an RV and boat among lakeside pines

20×35 RV Cover and Carport

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with black roll-up door framed by alpine peaks, steel building exterior

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop | Steel and Stud, From $12,200

12

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,900$12,200SAVE $1,700
or $254/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Workshop and Detached Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Tradespeople, woodworkers, and welders spec this as a working detached shop. 700 sq ft holds a table saw, miter station, drill press, MIG welder, and a 20×35 assembly bench without crowding. Add R-19 fiberglass batt.

You’re viewing:Workshop and Detached Shop·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,200$13,900Save $1,700
or as low as $254/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$11,300
20×35
this size
$12,200
20×36
longer
$12,500
22×35
wider
$13,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Insulated
  • R-19 Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-WORKSHOP-DETACHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 workshop and detached shop.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Tradespeople, woodworkers, and welders spec this as a working detached shop.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

Workshop and Detached Shop layout.

Tradespeople, woodworkers, and welders spec this as a working detached shop. 700 sq ft holds a table saw, miter station, drill press, MIG welder, and a 20×35 assembly bench without crowding. Add R-19 fiberglass batt insulation, a 36-inch walk-in, and two 20×35 windows for cross-ventilation and natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Workshop and Detached Shop works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop and Detached Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop and Detached Shop spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop and Detached Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop and detached shop
Everyday workshop and detached shop
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop and detached shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop and detached shop + seasonal storage
workshop and detached shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$254/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 workshop and detached shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $254/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop and Detached Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop and Detached Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop and Detached Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop and Detached Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 workshop and detached shop cost?

A 20×35 workshop and detached shop from Steel and Stud starts at $12,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $254/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 workshop and detached shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop and detached shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 workshop and detached shop?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop and detached shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 workshop and detached shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 workshop and detached shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 workshop and detached shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $254/month on a 20×35 workshop and detached shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 workshop and detached shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 workshop and detached shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×35 workshop and detached shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop and Detached Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with black roll-up door framed by alpine peaks, steel building exterior

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark green steel garage at twilight with closed roll-up door and a lit side window

20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed | Steel and Stud, From $11,000

12

20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,550$11,000SAVE $1,550
or $229/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers cover a sub-compact tractor, brush hog, finish mower, ATV, and a stack of round bales under one roof. The 12-foot leg option clears a Kubota with a front-end loader raised. Open the gable end for.

You’re viewing:Hobby Farm Equipment Shed·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,000$12,550Save $1,550
or as low as $229/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$10,100
20×35
this size
$11,000
20×36
longer
$11,300
22×35
wider
$12,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Gable
  • Lean-To Ready
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-HOBBY-FARM-EQUIPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Hobby farmers cover a sub-compact tractor, brush hog, finish mower, ATV, and a stack of round bales under one roof.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 35′ · 700 ground + loft

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed layout.

Hobby farmers cover a sub-compact tractor, brush hog, finish mower, ATV, and a stack of round bales under one roof. The 12-foot leg option clears a Kubota with a front-end loader raised. Open the gable end for drive-through access and add a lean-to later for hay storage off one sidewall.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Farm Equipment Shed works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Farm Equipment Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Farm Equipment Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby farm equipment shed
Everyday hobby farm equipment shed
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby farm equipment shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby farm equipment shed + seasonal storage
hobby farm equipment shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$229/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $229/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Farm Equipment Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Farm Equipment Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Farm Equipment Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed cost?

A 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed from Steel and Stud starts at $11,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $229/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $229/month on a 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×35 hobby farm equipment shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Farm Equipment Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark green steel garage at twilight with closed roll-up door and a lit side window

20×35 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with tan doors and stacked firewood rack near mountain pines

20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn | Steel and Stud, From $11,000

12

20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,550$11,000SAVE $1,550
or $229/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Two-Stall Horse Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Equestrians configure this footprint as two 20×35 stalls plus an 11-foot tack/feed aisle. The vertical roof sheds rain cleanly off the 35-foot run, and 20×35 windows on each stall give airflow. Add a sliding barn door.

You’re viewing:Two-Stall Horse Barn·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,000$12,550Save $1,550
or as low as $229/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$10,100
20×35
this size
$11,000
20×36
longer
$11,300
22×35
wider
$12,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Vertical Roof
  • 2 Stalls + Tack
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-TWO-STALL-HORSE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 two-stall horse barn.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Equestrians configure this footprint as two 20×35 stalls plus an 11-foot tack/feed aisle.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

Two-Stall Horse Barn layout.

Equestrians configure this footprint as two 20×35 stalls plus an 11-foot tack/feed aisle. The vertical roof sheds rain cleanly off the 35-foot run, and 20×35 windows on each stall give airflow. Add a sliding barn door at one gable and Dutch doors on the long wall for direct paddock turnout.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Stall Horse Barn works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Stall Horse Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Stall Horse Barn spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Stall Horse Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday two-stall horse barn
Everyday two-stall horse barn
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-stall horse barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-stall horse barn + seasonal storage
two-stall horse barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$229/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 two-stall horse barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $229/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Stall Horse Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Stall Horse Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Stall Horse Barn also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Stall Horse Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 two-stall horse barn cost?

A 20×35 two-stall horse barn from Steel and Stud starts at $11,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $229/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 two-stall horse barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-stall horse barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 two-stall horse barn?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-stall horse barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 two-stall horse barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 two-stall horse barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 two-stall horse barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $229/month on a 20×35 two-stall horse barn.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 two-stall horse barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 two-stall horse barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×35 two-stall horse barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Stall Horse Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with tan doors and stacked firewood rack near mountain pines

20×35 Two-Stall Horse Barn

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal shed with single slope roof and open front bays on a grassy pasture

20×35 Storage Building

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Storage Building, built for daily backyard use.

Suburban homeowners who’ve outgrown their 20×35 shed step up to a 20×35 storage building for mowers, snowblowers, kayaks, holiday bins, and patio furniture. Spec one 20×35 roll-up for ride-on equipment and one 36-inch.

You’re viewing:Storage Building·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 8-10 ft Legs
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • Budget Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 storage building.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Suburban homeowners who’ve outgrown their 20×35 shed step up to a 20×35 storage building for mowers, snowblowers, kayaks, holiday bins, and patio furniture.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft shop

Storage Building layout.

Suburban homeowners who’ve outgrown their 20×35 shed step up to a 20×35 storage building for mowers, snowblowers, kayaks, holiday bins, and patio furniture. Spec one 20×35 roll-up for ride-on equipment and one 36-inch walk-in for daily access. 14-gauge framing and 29-gauge panels keep the price floor low.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Building works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday storage building
Everyday storage building
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building + seasonal storage
storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Storage Building, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 storage building cost?

A 20×35 storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 storage building?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 storage building.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×35 storage building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×35 storage building typically adds $5,600–$8,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal shed with single slope roof and open front bays on a grassy pasture

20×35 Storage Building

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red steel building with tall open bay and white roll-up door beside an autumn lake

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Man Cave and She Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Homeowners finishing out a hangout space wainscot the lower 4 feet, drop in two 20×35 windows, and add French doors for curb appeal. The 700 sq ft fits a pool table, bar, sectional, and TV wall, or a craft studio with.

You’re viewing:Man Cave and She Shed·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • French Doors
  • Insulated Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 man cave and she shed.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Homeowners finishing out a hangout space wainscot the lower 4 feet, drop in two 20×35 windows, and add French doors for curb appeal.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 35′ · 700 ground + loft

Man Cave and She Shed layout.

Homeowners finishing out a hangout space wainscot the lower 4 feet, drop in two 20×35 windows, and add French doors for curb appeal. The 700 sq ft fits a pool table, bar, sectional, and TV wall, or a craft studio with cutting tables, shelving, and a reading nook. Insulate with R-13 vapor barrier minimum.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave and She Shed works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Man Cave and She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave and She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave and She Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave and She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave and she shed
Everyday man cave and she shed
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave and she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave and she shed + seasonal storage
man cave and she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 man cave and she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave and She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Man Cave and She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Man Cave and She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave and She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave and She Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave and She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 man cave and she shed cost?

A 20×35 man cave and she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 man cave and she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave and she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 man cave and she shed?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave and she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 man cave and she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 man cave and she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 man cave and she shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 man cave and she shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 man cave and she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 man cave and she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×35 man cave and she shed for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave and she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave and She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red steel building with tall open bay and white roll-up door beside an autumn lake

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel carport implement shelter at golden hour with a tractor and field cultivator underneath

20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover | Steel and Stud, From $12,200

12

20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,900$12,200SAVE $1,700
or $254/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Contractors and electricians park a 20-foot enclosed job trailer plus a service van under one roof. The taller 13-foot leg clears box trucks and ladder racks. Spec a 20×35 roll-up at the gable, a slide-bolt walk-in, and.

You’re viewing:Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,200$13,900Save $1,700
or as low as $254/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$11,300
20×35
this size
$12,200
20×36
longer
$12,500
22×35
wider
$13,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Security Bars
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-CONTRACTOR-STORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Contractors and electricians park a 20-foot enclosed job trailer plus a service van under one roof.

TruckTrailer20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft pass-through

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover layout.

Contractors and electricians park a 20-foot enclosed job trailer plus a service van under one roof. The taller 13-foot leg clears box trucks and ladder racks. Spec a 20×35 roll-up at the gable, a slide-bolt walk-in, and security bars on the windows for tool theft protection on remote yards.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor storage and job trailer cover
Everyday contractor storage and job trailer cover
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor storage and job trailer cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor storage and job trailer cover + seasonal storage
contractor storage and job trailer cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$254/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $254/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover cost?

A 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover from Steel and Stud starts at $12,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $254/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor storage and job trailer cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor storage and job trailer cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $254/month on a 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel carport implement shelter at golden hour with a tractor and field cultivator underneath

20×35 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Open front metal shed with single slope roof and wood posts near grain bins

20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,000

12

20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,550$11,000SAVE $1,550
or $229/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Round-Bale and Grain Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Rural property owners stack roughly 30 round bales, pallets of seed, and a row of grain bins under a 20×35 with a Galvalume bare-metal finish that shrugs off coastal salt air. Spec auger ground anchors for.

You’re viewing:Round-Bale and Grain Storage·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,000$12,550Save $1,550
or as low as $229/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$10,100
20×35
this size
$11,000
20×36
longer
$11,300
22×35
wider
$12,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume Finish
  • Ground Anchors
  • Grain Bin Framing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-ROUND-BALE-GRAINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 round-bale and grain storage.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Rural property owners stack roughly 30 round bales, pallets of seed, and a row of grain bins under a 20×35 with a Galvalume bare-metal finish that shrugs off coastal salt air.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft shop

Round-Bale and Grain Storage layout.

Rural property owners stack roughly 30 round bales, pallets of seed, and a row of grain bins under a 20×35 with a Galvalume bare-metal finish that shrugs off coastal salt air. Spec auger ground anchors for direct-on-dirt installs, framed openings for a future overhead conveyor, and 26-gauge panels for hail country. Cheaper per square foot than any pole barn at the same footprint.

💡 Pro tip:Round-Bale and Grain Storage works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Round-Bale and Grain Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Round-Bale and Grain Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Round-Bale and Grain Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday round-bale and grain storage
Everyday round-bale and grain storage
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a round-bale and grain storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWround-bale and grain storage + seasonal storage
round-bale and grain storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$229/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 round-bale and grain storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $229/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Round-Bale and Grain Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Round-Bale and Grain Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Round-Bale and Grain Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Round-Bale and Grain Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 round-bale and grain storage cost?

A 20×35 round-bale and grain storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $229/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 round-bale and grain storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud round-bale and grain storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 round-bale and grain storage?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud round-bale and grain storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 round-bale and grain storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 round-bale and grain storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 round-bale and grain storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $229/month on a 20×35 round-bale and grain storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 round-bale and grain storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 round-bale and grain storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×35 round-bale and grain storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Round-Bale and Grain Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Open front metal shed with single slope roof and wood posts near grain bins

20×35 Round-Bale and Grain Storage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal garage with white trim, open bay revealing a backyard workshop and workbench

20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop | Steel and Stud, From $12,600

12

20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,350$12,600SAVE $1,750
or $263/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Welders and small fab shops use the 12-foot legs to clear an overhead door track and lift table. 700 sq ft fits a 20×35 plasma cutter, two welding bays, and a parts rack. Spec 26-gauge panels for spark resistance, a.

You’re viewing:Small Fabrication and Welding Shop·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,600$14,350Save $1,750
or as low as $263/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$11,700
20×35
this size
$12,600
20×36
longer
$12,900
22×35
wider
$13,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 26 GA Panels
  • Framed Openings
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-SMALL-FABRICATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Welders and small fab shops use the 12-foot legs to clear an overhead door track and lift table.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop layout.

Welders and small fab shops use the 12-foot legs to clear an overhead door track and lift table. 700 sq ft fits a 20×35 plasma cutter, two welding bays, and a parts rack. Spec 26-gauge panels for spark resistance, a 20×35 roll-up, and framed openings for an exhaust fan and 200-amp electrical.

💡 Pro tip:Small Fabrication and Welding Shop works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Fabrication and Welding Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Fabrication and Welding Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday small fabrication and welding shop
Everyday small fabrication and welding shop
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small fabrication and welding shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall fabrication and welding shop + seasonal storage
small fabrication and welding shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$263/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $263/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Fabrication and Welding Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Fabrication and Welding Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Fabrication and Welding Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop cost?

A 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop from Steel and Stud starts at $12,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $263/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small fabrication and welding shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small fabrication and welding shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $263/month on a 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 20×35 small fabrication and welding shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Small Fabrication and Welding Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal garage with white trim, open bay revealing a backyard workshop and workbench

20×35 Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel building with cream trim and open bay storing bass boats by water

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Boat and Toy Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Lake-house owners park a 24-foot bowrider on the trailer, a Sea-Doo, and a side-by-side under one 20×35 metal building. The 35-foot length covers the trailer tongue. Order a 20×35 roll-up for the boat, a walk-in on the.

You’re viewing:Boat and Toy Storage·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Asphalt Anchors
  • Boat + Toys
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-BOAT-TOY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 boat and toy storage.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Lake-house owners park a 24-foot bowrider on the trailer, a Sea-Doo, and a side-by-side under one 20×35 metal building.

RV BAYDaily Driver20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft · tall walls

Boat and Toy Storage layout.

Lake-house owners park a 24-foot bowrider on the trailer, a Sea-Doo, and a side-by-side under one 20×35 metal building. The 35-foot length covers the trailer tongue. Order a 20×35 roll-up for the boat, a walk-in on the side for daily access, and asphalt anchors if it sits on a paved pad.

💡 Pro tip:Boat and Toy Storage works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Boat and Toy Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat and Toy Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat and Toy Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat and Toy Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat and toy storage
Everyday boat and toy storage
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat and toy storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat and toy storage + seasonal storage
boat and toy storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 boat and toy storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat and Toy Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Boat and Toy Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Boat and Toy Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat and Toy Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat and Toy Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat and Toy Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 boat and toy storage cost?

A 20×35 boat and toy storage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 boat and toy storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat and toy storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 boat and toy storage?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat and toy storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 boat and toy storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 boat and toy storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 boat and toy storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 boat and toy storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 boat and toy storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 boat and toy storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×35 boat and toy storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat and toy storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat and Toy Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel building with cream trim and open bay storing bass boats by water

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green commercial metal building storage units at night with soffit lighting over doors

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

100′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×30 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $48,550

12

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$55,350$48,550SAVE $6,800
or $1011/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×30Mini-Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Small business owners launching a self-storage operation use the 100-ft length to divide into 10 or 20 individual bays with roll-up doors along one or both sides. The 30-ft depth fits standard 100×30 and 100×30 unit.

You’re viewing:Mini-Storage Facility·Size100×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$48,550$55,350Save $6,800
or as low as $1011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×30
100×30
this size
$48,550
100×40
longer
$75,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Multi-Bay Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X30-MINI-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×30 mini-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 30 feet long. Small business owners launching a self-storage operation use the 100-ft length to divide into 10 or 20 individual bays with roll-up doors along one or both sides.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 30′ · 3,000 sq ft shop

Mini-Storage Facility layout.

Small business owners launching a self-storage operation use the 100-ft length to divide into 10 or 20 individual bays with roll-up doors along one or both sides. The 30-ft depth fits standard 100×30 and 100×30 unit footprints with a center drive aisle. At 20 units renting for $75 to $100/month each, gross monthly revenue runs $1,500 to $2,000, paying off the building in 24 to 36 months at typical rural occupancy.

💡 Pro tip:Mini-Storage Facility works well at 100×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×30 Mini-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mini-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mini-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mini-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday mini-storage facility
Everyday mini-storage facility
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mini-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmini-storage facility + seasonal storage
mini-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×30 mini-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×30?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 30′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mini-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×30 Mini-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×30 Mini-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mini-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mini-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×30

Fleet Garage

100×30 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 100×30

Fabrication Shop

100×30 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 100×30

Barndominium Shell

100×30 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$46,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 100×30

Equipment Storage Barn

100×30 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 100×30

Auto Repair Shop

100×30 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 100×30

Warehouse

100×30 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🌾 100×30

Horse Barn

100×30 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 100×30

Hobbyist Workshop

100×30 hobbyist workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobbyist Workshop →

🏢 100×30

Commercial Garage

100×30 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🌾 100×30

Hay & Feed Barn

100×30 hay & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Barn →

🎯 100×30

Event & Recreation Space

100×30 event & recreation space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$46,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event & Recreation Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mini-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×30 mini-storage facility cost?

A 100×30 mini-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $48,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×30 mini-storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud mini-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×30 mini-storage facility?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mini-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×30 mini-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×30 mini-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×30 mini-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1011/month on a 100×30 mini-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×30 mini-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×30 mini-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×30 mini-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Mini-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$48,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green commercial metal building storage units at night with soffit lighting over doors

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

100′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×30 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$48,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage with three roll-up doors and a fleet of white cargo vans parked outside

100×30 Fleet Garage

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

100′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×30 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×30 Fleet Garage | Steel and Stud, From $48,550

12

100×30 Fleet Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$55,350$48,550SAVE $6,800
or $1011/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×30Fleet Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×30 Fleet Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Contractors and service companies park 8 to 10 work trucks bumper-to-bumper down the 100-ft run, with 12-ft to 16-ft legs clearing ladder racks and bucket booms. One 100×30 roll-up at the gable end lets the lead truck.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage·Size100×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$48,550$55,350Save $6,800
or as low as $1011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×30
100×30
this size
$48,550
100×40
longer
$75,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 16′ Legs
  • 8-10 Truck Capacity
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X30-FLEET-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×30 fleet garage.

100 feet wide × 30 feet long. Contractors and service companies park 8 to 10 work trucks bumper-to-bumper down the 100-ft run, with 12-ft to 16-ft legs clearing ladder racks and bucket booms.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area100′ × 30′ · 3,000 sq ft

Fleet Garage layout.

Contractors and service companies park 8 to 10 work trucks bumper-to-bumper down the 100-ft run, with 12-ft to 16-ft legs clearing ladder racks and bucket booms. One 100×30 roll-up at the gable end lets the lead truck pull through. Beats outdoor parking on insurance alone.

💡 Pro tip:Fleet Garage works well at 100×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×30 Fleet Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage spec sheet.

Width100′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage
Everyday fleet garage
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage + seasonal storage
fleet garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×30 Fleet Garage, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×30 fleet garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×30?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 30′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×30 Fleet Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×30 Fleet Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage also viewed:

🏢 100×30

Mini-Storage Facility

100×30 mini-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mini-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×30

Fabrication Shop

100×30 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 100×30

Barndominium Shell

100×30 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$46,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 100×30

Equipment Storage Barn

100×30 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 100×30

Auto Repair Shop

100×30 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 100×30

Warehouse

100×30 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🌾 100×30

Horse Barn

100×30 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 100×30

Hobbyist Workshop

100×30 hobbyist workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobbyist Workshop →

🏢 100×30

Commercial Garage

100×30 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🌾 100×30

Hay & Feed Barn

100×30 hay & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Barn →

🎯 100×30

Event & Recreation Space

100×30 event & recreation space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$46,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event & Recreation Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 100×30 fleet garage cost?

A 100×30 fleet garage from Steel and Stud starts at $48,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×30 fleet garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×30 fleet garage?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×30 fleet garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×30 fleet garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×30 fleet garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1011/month on a 100×30 fleet garage.

What warranty comes with the 100×30 fleet garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×30 fleet garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×30 fleet garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$48,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage with three roll-up doors and a fleet of white cargo vans parked outside

100×30 Fleet Garage

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

100′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×30 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$48,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green metal garage with two black sectional doors and rooster weathervane by an autumn lake

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations | Steel and Stud, From $174,500

12

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$198,950$174,500SAVE $24,450
or $3635/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, built for daily backyard use.

10,000 sq ft fleet garage for 30 to 45 work trucks, vans, service trailers, or municipal vehicles under one engineered roof. Multiple 100×100 roll-ups along the long wall keep crew mornings moving without bottlenecks at.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$174,500$198,950Save $24,450
or as low as $3635/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$164,750
100×100
this size
$174,500
100×110
longer
$201,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $54,500
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-FLEET-GARAGE-VEHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. 10,000 sq ft fleet garage for 30 to 45 work trucks, vans, service trailers, or municipal vehicles under one engineered roof.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area100′ × 100′ · 10,000 sq ft

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations layout.

10,000 sq ft fleet garage for 30 to 45 work trucks, vans, service trailers, or municipal vehicles under one engineered roof. Multiple 100×100 roll-ups along the long wall keep crew mornings moving without bottlenecks at the door.

💡 Pro tip:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage / vehicle operations
Everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage / vehicle operations.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
fleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3635/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3635/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations also viewed:

🏭 100×100

Manufacturing Floor

100×100 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 100×100

Distribution Hub

100×100 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 100×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

100×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 100×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 100×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 100×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

100×100 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 100×100

Trucking Terminal

100×100 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 100×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

100×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 100×100

Municipal / Government Facility

100×100 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 100×100

Indoor Riding Arena

100×100 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 100×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

100×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations cost?

A 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations from Steel and Stud starts at $174,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3635/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3635/month on a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations typically adds $80,000–$120,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$174,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green metal garage with two black sectional doors and rooster weathervane by an autumn lake

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$174,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Welder working inside a steel building fabrication shop with overhead crane and racks

100×100 Manufacturing Floor

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 Manufacturing Floor | Steel and Stud, From $176,750

12

100×100 Manufacturing Floor
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$201,500$176,750SAVE $24,750
or $3682/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100Manufacturing Floor

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 Manufacturing Floor, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Column-free 10,000 sq ft floor accommodates production lines, CNC equipment, robotic cells, conveyor systems, and overhead crane bridges. Reinforced framing supports rooftop HVAC and rooftop solar arrays without.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Floor·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$176,750$201,500Save $24,750
or as low as $3682/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$167,000
100×100
this size
$176,750
100×110
longer
$203,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $68,000
  • Crane Ready
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-MANUFACTURING-FLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 manufacturing floor.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free 10,000 sq ft floor accommodates production lines, CNC equipment, robotic cells, conveyor systems, and overhead crane bridges.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 100′ · 10,000 sq ft

Manufacturing Floor layout.

Column-free 10,000 sq ft floor accommodates production lines, CNC equipment, robotic cells, conveyor systems, and overhead crane bridges. Reinforced framing supports rooftop HVAC and rooftop solar arrays without secondary structural work.

💡 Pro tip:Manufacturing Floor works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 Manufacturing Floor in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Floor.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Floor spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Floor.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing floor
Everyday manufacturing floor
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing floor.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing floor + seasonal storage
manufacturing floor + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 Manufacturing Floor, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3682/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 manufacturing floor is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3682/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Floor shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 Manufacturing Floor buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 Manufacturing Floor

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Floor · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Floor also viewed:

🏡 100×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏢 100×100

Distribution Hub

100×100 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 100×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

100×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 100×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 100×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 100×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

100×100 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 100×100

Trucking Terminal

100×100 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 100×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

100×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 100×100

Municipal / Government Facility

100×100 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 100×100

Indoor Riding Arena

100×100 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 100×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

100×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Floor questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 manufacturing floor cost?

A 100×100 manufacturing floor from Steel and Stud starts at $176,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3682/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 manufacturing floor price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing floor ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 manufacturing floor?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing floor different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 manufacturing floor need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 manufacturing floor delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 manufacturing floor without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3682/month on a 100×100 manufacturing floor.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 manufacturing floor?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 manufacturing floor in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×100 manufacturing floor handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×100 manufacturing floor ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Floor quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$176,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Welder working inside a steel building fabrication shop with overhead crane and racks

100×100 Manufacturing Floor

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$176,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Size? Build Your Metal Buildings in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Instant Estimate

Metal Buildings Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Pre-Engineered Steel

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Over Stick-Built

Faster timelines, lower total cost and a longer structural lifespan. Here is why thousands of property owners build with Steel and Stud instead of wood, block or masonry.

📈

40 to 60% Lower Total Build Cost

Factory fabrication cuts on-site labor, eliminates material waste and compresses your project timeline from months to weeks. Most owners save $15 to $30/sqft versus comparable wood-frame or concrete block construction.

📑

PE-Stamped Drawings Included

Structural engineering and stamped plans come standard with every cold-formed steel order. Designed for your local wind speed, snow load and seismic zone. Submit directly to your building department for permit approval.

Column-Free Interiors to 200+ Feet

Rigid frame engineering eliminates support columns inside the building envelope. Use every square foot of floor space for equipment, inventory, vehicles, courts or congregation seating without obstruction.

🔨

Zero Rot, Warp or Termite Risk

Galvanized steel framing and coated panels resist corrosion, mold and insect damage. The structure holds its form for decades with minimal upkeep. No repainting, no replacing warped studs, no pest treatments.

🌏

Expand, Extend or Relocate

Need more space next year? Add bays to extend length, attach lean-tos for side coverage, or install mezzanine framing for a second level. If your site changes, the building can be disassembled and re-erected on a new foundation.

🏧

Design and Price Online in 3D

The online building configurator lets you set exact dimensions, roof profile, panel type, insulation, doors, windows, colors and accessories. See instant pricing, then download your configuration summary.

Span Engineering

Clear Span vs Single Span vs Multi-Span

The span type you select affects interior layout flexibility, column placement, cost per square foot and maximum achievable width. Steel and Stud engineers each building to the optimal span configuration for your specific application.

Clear Span

No columns, W up to 80 ft

Zero interior columns
Maximum floor plan flexibility
Ideal for sports, worship, hangars
Higher cost per sqft at wide spans

Single Span

Small builds, W up to 40 ft

Most affordable option
Fastest fabrication lead time
Great for small shops and storage
Limited to 40 ft max width
Customer Reviews

What Property Owners Say About Steel and Stud

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Metal Buildings.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"I needed a large, tall carport to protect my camping trailer in the Texas Panhandle. Bill was patient and very thorough. Three years later, after 80 mph winds collapsed it, Bill stayed in touch the whole way through the rebuild — even after warranty. No one is more customer-friendly."

TP
Verified Customer
RV Owner, Texas
Heavy-Duty Carport
★★★★★

"I ordered two carports for the Healthy Schools Healthy Communities grant in Cabool, MO. Bill went above and beyond — thorough on every detail, called me right back, walked me through the whole order. He even followed up on instructions for the slab pour."

HS
Grant Coordinator
Cabool, MO
Metal Carports
★★★★☆

"Can't ask for any better service. Early install, on time per schedule, efficient and very speedy. Installers didn't stop until completed. No hype sale — we received exactly what we ordered."

BP
Berny Puderer
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
Common Questions

Metal Buildings FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Widths from 20 to 100+ feet, lengths from 20 to 200+ feet, eave heights from 10 to 24 feet. Buildings wider than 60 feet typically use multi-span framing with interior columns.

Shell pricing ranges from $8 to $22 per square foot depending on span, height, load ratings, insulation and accessories. Larger footprints cost less per foot due to fixed engineering spread over more area. Steel and Stud provides itemized quotes so you can compare line by line.

Clear span means zero interior columns, ideal when you need open floor space (warehouses, arenas, hangars). Multi-span uses interior columns to achieve wider total footprints (80 to 200+ feet) at lower cost. Choose based on how you plan to use the interior.

Yes. Every cold-formed steel building ships with professional structural engineering and stamped drawings ready for your local building department. No separate engineering fee.

Roll-up overhead doors to 24x16, walk-in doors, windows, skylights, gutters, insulation, wainscot, cupolas, lean-tos, mezzanine framing, crane rails and bi-fold hangar doors. Everything is configurable in the 3D designer.

Six to twelve weeks from approved engineering. Components ship on flatbed trucks to your site, ready for erection. Delivery is included in pricing for all 48 states.

Buildings under 40x60 can be owner-erected with the right equipment and experience. Larger structures need a professional crew with crane access. We can connect you with experienced erectors in your region.

Yes. Commercial financing, lease-to-own, equipment financing and monthly payment plans are all available. View all options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Steel Building Sizes, Configurations and Cost Breakdown

Pre-engineered steel structures use cold-formed framing fabricated off-site to your exact specifications. The kit ships to your property, ready for ground-up assembly. This eliminates the weather delays, material waste and skilled-labor bottleneck of conventional construction, cutting total project cost by 40 to 60 percent on average. Steel and Stud has delivered this approach to thousands of commercial and agricultural property owners since 2004.

Available widths run from 20 to 100+ feet. Lengths extend from 20 to 200+ feet in bay increments. Eave heights span 10 to 24+ feet. Rigid frame engineering, a Steel and Stud core competency, delivers column-free interiors to 80 feet wide. Multi-span configurations push total width past 200 feet for campus-scale facilities.

What Drives Pricing in 2026

Total square footage, eave height, span type, local load requirements (wind, snow, seismic), insulation spec, door count and delivery distance all factor into your final quote. Rough benchmarks: $8 to $14 per square foot for agricultural shells, $12 to $18 for commercial buildings, $16 to $22+ for heavy industrial with crane rails or mezzanines. Larger footprints cost less per foot because fixed engineering is spread across more area.

How the 3D Building Configurator Works

The online design tool walks you through dimensions, roof profile (gable, gambrel, single slope), panel orientation, insulation layers, door and window placement, color selection and structural add-ons. It generates a live price estimate and downloadable configuration. A building specialist then finalizes the engineering package and prepares stamped drawings for your permit submission.

Industry Applications

Commercial: retail storefronts, auto shops, contractor yards, self-storage facilities. Industrial: manufacturing plants, distribution hubs, fleet maintenance bays. Agricultural: equipment barns, hay storage, livestock shelter, riding arenas. Institutional: churches, gyms, government facilities, aviation hangars, sports complexes. Each application benefits from open span interiors, fast erection and low lifetime maintenance.

Related Categories

For smaller enclosed structures, explore enclosed steel garages and open metal buildings. For agricultural use, see metal barns. For individual framing components, browse purlins, standing seam, insulated panels and roofing systems.

READY TO BUILD YOUR METAL BUILDING WITH CONFIDENCE?

Join 15,000+ property owners who trust Steel and Stud. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on all metal building orders.

View Cart